Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
1
2
copyCopyright Lee Asher 2005
All rights reserved With the exception of short quotations forthe purpose of review no part of this manuscript text orphoto may be reproduced in any form or by any meanselectronic stored in a retrieval system photocopying orotherwise without the prior written permission of the pub-lisher No part of this manuscript may be transmitted in anyform or by any means electronic photocopying or otherwisewithout prior permission of the publisher
This manuscript is designed to provide authoritative informa-tion with regard to the Diving Board Double It is sold withthe understanding that neither the author the publisher noranyone involved with this manuscript is responsible foranyone engaging in dangerous acts with the acrobatic DivingBoard Double The author publisher or anyone involved withthis manuscript shall not be liable or held accountable for anysuch consequences
Diving Board Doublersquos Broadcast rights (includes InternetTelevision Video or any other medium known or to be in-vented) shall be reserved by Lee Asher Only written consentfrom Lee Asher authorizes permission for Broadcast
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 337
Asher LeeCatch Diving Board Double Asher
Sleight of hand
Printed in the United States of America
3
TheDiving Board Double
by
Lee Asher
with help from Kip Pascal
4
Table of Contents
Dedication5
Acknowledgements5
Introduction6
Interesting Trivia8
Basic Technique (Non-acrobatic)12
Advanced Technique (Acrobatic)22
TIPS27
Bonus Ambitious31
The Exercise36
Behind The Back41
Deck Vanish44
Where Do I Go From Here47
About The Author48
Contact Information49
References50
5
Dedication
This PDF is dedicated to those who put in the required practiceYoursquoll soon understand that it was well worth it
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank the following people for their generoushelp with this project
Steve FearsonAaron FisherBilly GoodwinJustin HanesHart KeeneRichard LevinStephen MinchTG MurphyWest 11th Print ShopKip Pascal
The Folks
And As Alwayshellipthe Esteemed Members of the Magic Mafia
6
Diving Board Double
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Diving Board Double manu-script Some of you have seen my Ambitious Card sequencesin 5 Card Stud and Le Asher the French Tour Booklet Whilemany ambitious routines are complicated and difficult towatch the effects in the aforementioned titles have cardsvisually rise cleanly directly and without any confusion
All of this is based upon having a strong foundation in theDiving Board Double Not only is the Diving Board Double(referred to as DBD from now on) a strong convincing tech-nique but it has a variety of applications You can say it hasseveral faces This manuscript will focus on what I consider tobe the two most important applications Others will be dis-cussed but not in great detail
Letrsquos talk about these two applications for a moment
I predict based on the study of my demographics that mostpeople under the age of 25 will flock toward the acrobaticapplication of the DBD The acrobatic version will remindmost that anti-gravity is possible (Only you will know itrsquos adouble lift) Not only does it show off your skill but it willimpress anyone within your radius By the way itrsquos a wonder-ful visual icebreaker drawing people toward you withoutsaying a word
Now I also predict anyone over the age of 25 has alreadystopped reading this manuscript In which case they will miss
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
2
copyCopyright Lee Asher 2005
All rights reserved With the exception of short quotations forthe purpose of review no part of this manuscript text orphoto may be reproduced in any form or by any meanselectronic stored in a retrieval system photocopying orotherwise without the prior written permission of the pub-lisher No part of this manuscript may be transmitted in anyform or by any means electronic photocopying or otherwisewithout prior permission of the publisher
This manuscript is designed to provide authoritative informa-tion with regard to the Diving Board Double It is sold withthe understanding that neither the author the publisher noranyone involved with this manuscript is responsible foranyone engaging in dangerous acts with the acrobatic DivingBoard Double The author publisher or anyone involved withthis manuscript shall not be liable or held accountable for anysuch consequences
Diving Board Doublersquos Broadcast rights (includes InternetTelevision Video or any other medium known or to be in-vented) shall be reserved by Lee Asher Only written consentfrom Lee Asher authorizes permission for Broadcast
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 337
Asher LeeCatch Diving Board Double Asher
Sleight of hand
Printed in the United States of America
3
TheDiving Board Double
by
Lee Asher
with help from Kip Pascal
4
Table of Contents
Dedication5
Acknowledgements5
Introduction6
Interesting Trivia8
Basic Technique (Non-acrobatic)12
Advanced Technique (Acrobatic)22
TIPS27
Bonus Ambitious31
The Exercise36
Behind The Back41
Deck Vanish44
Where Do I Go From Here47
About The Author48
Contact Information49
References50
5
Dedication
This PDF is dedicated to those who put in the required practiceYoursquoll soon understand that it was well worth it
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank the following people for their generoushelp with this project
Steve FearsonAaron FisherBilly GoodwinJustin HanesHart KeeneRichard LevinStephen MinchTG MurphyWest 11th Print ShopKip Pascal
The Folks
And As Alwayshellipthe Esteemed Members of the Magic Mafia
6
Diving Board Double
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Diving Board Double manu-script Some of you have seen my Ambitious Card sequencesin 5 Card Stud and Le Asher the French Tour Booklet Whilemany ambitious routines are complicated and difficult towatch the effects in the aforementioned titles have cardsvisually rise cleanly directly and without any confusion
All of this is based upon having a strong foundation in theDiving Board Double Not only is the Diving Board Double(referred to as DBD from now on) a strong convincing tech-nique but it has a variety of applications You can say it hasseveral faces This manuscript will focus on what I consider tobe the two most important applications Others will be dis-cussed but not in great detail
Letrsquos talk about these two applications for a moment
I predict based on the study of my demographics that mostpeople under the age of 25 will flock toward the acrobaticapplication of the DBD The acrobatic version will remindmost that anti-gravity is possible (Only you will know itrsquos adouble lift) Not only does it show off your skill but it willimpress anyone within your radius By the way itrsquos a wonder-ful visual icebreaker drawing people toward you withoutsaying a word
Now I also predict anyone over the age of 25 has alreadystopped reading this manuscript In which case they will miss
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
3
TheDiving Board Double
by
Lee Asher
with help from Kip Pascal
4
Table of Contents
Dedication5
Acknowledgements5
Introduction6
Interesting Trivia8
Basic Technique (Non-acrobatic)12
Advanced Technique (Acrobatic)22
TIPS27
Bonus Ambitious31
The Exercise36
Behind The Back41
Deck Vanish44
Where Do I Go From Here47
About The Author48
Contact Information49
References50
5
Dedication
This PDF is dedicated to those who put in the required practiceYoursquoll soon understand that it was well worth it
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank the following people for their generoushelp with this project
Steve FearsonAaron FisherBilly GoodwinJustin HanesHart KeeneRichard LevinStephen MinchTG MurphyWest 11th Print ShopKip Pascal
The Folks
And As Alwayshellipthe Esteemed Members of the Magic Mafia
6
Diving Board Double
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Diving Board Double manu-script Some of you have seen my Ambitious Card sequencesin 5 Card Stud and Le Asher the French Tour Booklet Whilemany ambitious routines are complicated and difficult towatch the effects in the aforementioned titles have cardsvisually rise cleanly directly and without any confusion
All of this is based upon having a strong foundation in theDiving Board Double Not only is the Diving Board Double(referred to as DBD from now on) a strong convincing tech-nique but it has a variety of applications You can say it hasseveral faces This manuscript will focus on what I consider tobe the two most important applications Others will be dis-cussed but not in great detail
Letrsquos talk about these two applications for a moment
I predict based on the study of my demographics that mostpeople under the age of 25 will flock toward the acrobaticapplication of the DBD The acrobatic version will remindmost that anti-gravity is possible (Only you will know itrsquos adouble lift) Not only does it show off your skill but it willimpress anyone within your radius By the way itrsquos a wonder-ful visual icebreaker drawing people toward you withoutsaying a word
Now I also predict anyone over the age of 25 has alreadystopped reading this manuscript In which case they will miss
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
4
Table of Contents
Dedication5
Acknowledgements5
Introduction6
Interesting Trivia8
Basic Technique (Non-acrobatic)12
Advanced Technique (Acrobatic)22
TIPS27
Bonus Ambitious31
The Exercise36
Behind The Back41
Deck Vanish44
Where Do I Go From Here47
About The Author48
Contact Information49
References50
5
Dedication
This PDF is dedicated to those who put in the required practiceYoursquoll soon understand that it was well worth it
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank the following people for their generoushelp with this project
Steve FearsonAaron FisherBilly GoodwinJustin HanesHart KeeneRichard LevinStephen MinchTG MurphyWest 11th Print ShopKip Pascal
The Folks
And As Alwayshellipthe Esteemed Members of the Magic Mafia
6
Diving Board Double
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Diving Board Double manu-script Some of you have seen my Ambitious Card sequencesin 5 Card Stud and Le Asher the French Tour Booklet Whilemany ambitious routines are complicated and difficult towatch the effects in the aforementioned titles have cardsvisually rise cleanly directly and without any confusion
All of this is based upon having a strong foundation in theDiving Board Double Not only is the Diving Board Double(referred to as DBD from now on) a strong convincing tech-nique but it has a variety of applications You can say it hasseveral faces This manuscript will focus on what I consider tobe the two most important applications Others will be dis-cussed but not in great detail
Letrsquos talk about these two applications for a moment
I predict based on the study of my demographics that mostpeople under the age of 25 will flock toward the acrobaticapplication of the DBD The acrobatic version will remindmost that anti-gravity is possible (Only you will know itrsquos adouble lift) Not only does it show off your skill but it willimpress anyone within your radius By the way itrsquos a wonder-ful visual icebreaker drawing people toward you withoutsaying a word
Now I also predict anyone over the age of 25 has alreadystopped reading this manuscript In which case they will miss
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
5
Dedication
This PDF is dedicated to those who put in the required practiceYoursquoll soon understand that it was well worth it
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank the following people for their generoushelp with this project
Steve FearsonAaron FisherBilly GoodwinJustin HanesHart KeeneRichard LevinStephen MinchTG MurphyWest 11th Print ShopKip Pascal
The Folks
And As Alwayshellipthe Esteemed Members of the Magic Mafia
6
Diving Board Double
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Diving Board Double manu-script Some of you have seen my Ambitious Card sequencesin 5 Card Stud and Le Asher the French Tour Booklet Whilemany ambitious routines are complicated and difficult towatch the effects in the aforementioned titles have cardsvisually rise cleanly directly and without any confusion
All of this is based upon having a strong foundation in theDiving Board Double Not only is the Diving Board Double(referred to as DBD from now on) a strong convincing tech-nique but it has a variety of applications You can say it hasseveral faces This manuscript will focus on what I consider tobe the two most important applications Others will be dis-cussed but not in great detail
Letrsquos talk about these two applications for a moment
I predict based on the study of my demographics that mostpeople under the age of 25 will flock toward the acrobaticapplication of the DBD The acrobatic version will remindmost that anti-gravity is possible (Only you will know itrsquos adouble lift) Not only does it show off your skill but it willimpress anyone within your radius By the way itrsquos a wonder-ful visual icebreaker drawing people toward you withoutsaying a word
Now I also predict anyone over the age of 25 has alreadystopped reading this manuscript In which case they will miss
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
6
Diving Board Double
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Diving Board Double manu-script Some of you have seen my Ambitious Card sequencesin 5 Card Stud and Le Asher the French Tour Booklet Whilemany ambitious routines are complicated and difficult towatch the effects in the aforementioned titles have cardsvisually rise cleanly directly and without any confusion
All of this is based upon having a strong foundation in theDiving Board Double Not only is the Diving Board Double(referred to as DBD from now on) a strong convincing tech-nique but it has a variety of applications You can say it hasseveral faces This manuscript will focus on what I consider tobe the two most important applications Others will be dis-cussed but not in great detail
Letrsquos talk about these two applications for a moment
I predict based on the study of my demographics that mostpeople under the age of 25 will flock toward the acrobaticapplication of the DBD The acrobatic version will remindmost that anti-gravity is possible (Only you will know itrsquos adouble lift) Not only does it show off your skill but it willimpress anyone within your radius By the way itrsquos a wonder-ful visual icebreaker drawing people toward you withoutsaying a word
Now I also predict anyone over the age of 25 has alreadystopped reading this manuscript In which case they will miss
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
7
the next comment The true strength of this technique lies inthe non-acrobatic version of the DBD
This bears repeating so I will state it again
The true strength of this technique lies in the non-acrobaticversion of the DBD When working I most likely use thisversion over the acrobatic version - 9 out of 10 times
Remember you are the magician paid handsomely to performmiracles There should be no room for error The acrobaticversion rents a 13-story apartment complex when it comes toroom(s) for error
The non-acrobatic version works every time no questionsasked I consider it the workhorse of all the sleights in myarsenal It has become just about the only double lift I usewhen performing I donrsquot even think of trying to execute anacrobatic DBD while performing at a gig
Please donrsquot let me scare you off from trying the acrobaticDBD Yes you can learn to hit the acrobatic version just about100 of the time - I usually do My hesitation to overuse themove in a lay context comes from being a perfectionist espe-cially when it comes to performing for the public Also thereis no reason to make every card you turn over go airborne
You are now on the way to developing one of the most visualand highly regarded double lifts in use among professionalclose-up artists today
Have Fun
Lee Asher
Eugene Oregon --January 28th 2005
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
8
Interesting TriviaAs clicheacute as it may sound in order to transform yourself intothe best sleight-of-hand artist possible you have to educateyourself Knowing and understanding our magical history willhelp keep the art of magic alive and also pay tribute to thecreative ancestors who came before us I will keep the historylesson to a minimum because I know how eager you are to getright to the meat Still I urge you to go out and seek historicalinformation - further your knowledge Go above and beyondthese bits and pieces and I promise you will find ideas younever imagined
The Origin of the Double Lift
Research provides us with plenty of proof that the double liftwas invented and reinvented many times throughout historyMany magicians in multiple countries lay claim to this neces-sity of card magic
I am going to share one of my seminar experiences with younow
During my last several hundred lectures I habitually askedthe audience to answer this question ldquoWho was the first topublish the Double Liftrdquo
Do you know
Some attendees believed Dai Vernon was the first to publishthe move This was usually the first answer called out I could
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
9
understand how they would have thought it might have beenMr Vernon since he was so influential throughout his timeperiod He was also the one to modernize the double lift
Were you thinking Dai Vernon too
He isnrsquot the right answer
Others then immediately guessed Daryl but I reminded themVernon was much older than Daryl - so they began guessing inthe opposite direction
Without fail Hofzinser or Erdnase would now receive men-tion Neither were the first to publish the move
I also heard guesses ranging from Robert-Houdin to HarryLorayne with Charlie Miller and Slydini in between
No no no and no
Itrsquos time to tell you who it ishellip
Modern research indicates Englishman Richard Neve was thefirst to introduce the double lift into mainstream magic litera-ture in a book called The Merry Companion (circa 1716) Ishould also point out he has the honor of being the first topublish the Ambitious card plot
The Diving Board Double History
Cut to the summer of 1995 I was attending the University ofNevada Las Vegas During one of the many sessions I had inmy dorm room the diving board double was born At first Idid not understand what I had only that the two cards satside-jogged as one on top of the pack With some time itdeveloped into the non-acrobatic version of the DBD
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
10
As I was perfecting the non-acrobatic version I had a seren-dipitous occurrence while practicing The double flipped intothe air and then split Again I wasnrsquot sure what I had I justknew it was something
NOTE Irsquove discussed the history of the doublelift and the history of the diving board doublelift Some of you may be wondering if I willdiscuss the history of the diving board itself
Actually while I was writing this manuscriptthe original inventor of the Duraflex DivingBoard Raymond C Rude passed away Thiswas the original diving board incorporated intothe Olympics in the early 1960rsquos Letrsquos all holdour breath for a silent moment in memory ofRaymond C Rude
After time practice analysis and evaluation I knew bothversions of the DBD intimately I have explored every littlenuance from landing techniques with the acrobatic version toexact finger positions for proper execution of the non-acrobaticdouble I have lsquolivedrsquo with this move for some time now andknow when to use it - and when not to (for an example ofwhen not to use this technique I refer you to the TIPS sectionon page 27)
Both versions of the diving board have their time and place inthe scheme of things
As mentioned before I will not perform the acrobatic versionof the double at a paid gig The diving board will not staytogether 100 of the time mdash its technique relying on thephysical condition of the cards Cards canrsquot always be perfectand neither can I The patrons are paying way too muchmoney for me to drop the diving board into someonersquos soupAgain time and place
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
11
If you are at the magic meeting or sessioning with someoneand want to impress an onlooker mdash you might want to flip thedouble a foot or two in the air Itrsquos all up to you and yourpreferences With time you will develop a sense of when touse it for each situation For now I am just here to teach theproper execution
Grab your deck letrsquos get to ithellip
Noted magic author Stephen Minch provides a great historical resource onthe double lift in Darylrsquos Ambitious Card Omnibus (1987)
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
12
Basic Technique of theNon-Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Shallow end
Turning the Diving Board face up
Hold the deck face down in your dealing hand (For thismanuscript we will assume yoursquore right handed whichmeans you hold the deck in your left hand for dealing) Yourleft thumb should rest along the long left side of the deck (seephoto 1)
photo 1
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
13
Move your thumb from the left side and bend it so its tip (thefleshy part) touches the top two cards somewhere in themiddle - along the left side border (see photo 2)
It might feel strange bending your thumb into this particularposition but with some practice and a little stretching thetense feeling will eventually go away
Begin to raise the top cards with your left thumb - the goal isto lift the top two cards only making it seem as if they are onePractice will allow you to lift two cards without hesitationBelieve it or not the fleshy tip of your thumb is quite sensitiveIt can feel the difference between one and two cards
In the past Irsquove noticed some people havingtrouble getting the break straight from thethumb Irsquove recommended in preparation for theDBD to get a fourth finger break underneaththe top two cards first For example you couldthumb count two cards you could riffle up the
photo 2
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
14
back of the deck or just push off the top fewcards and obtain the break that way - I leave thisto your discretion Basically if you canrsquot get abreak with your thumb just get it first with yourpinky Now that you have a fourth finger breakgo back to the beginning of these directions andyou will find lifting two cards will come mucheasier
Once you have the break on the top two cards with the leftthumb extend your hitch-hiking digit out to its fullest comingto rest in a half Charlier-shift kind of position The double is inthe same position used in the Finley Tent Vanish Your secondthird and fourth fingertips trap the long right side of thedouble so it creates a hinge (see photos 3a and 3b)
photo3a
photo3b
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
15
Pay attention to where your thumb actually lays on thedouble Make sure it touches the center of the card If yourthumb sits off to either of the sides it makes the techniquedifficult and ultimately will not be executed to perfection
Move your left first finger underneath the deck and positionits tip on the upper right corner of the face card of the deckWith your forefinger begin pushing the deck up against thedouble using a Charlier-shift type of action The deck willmove closer to the thumb and at the same time the doublewill begin to bow (photo 4)
The movement of the deck pushing up against the double willgive the impression that itrsquos being squeezed This is not thecase Do not bend the double with your fingers
This bow is very important later on for maintaining the singlecard look Itrsquos also important because it will help both cardsstay together during the whole technique You will reallyappreciate the bow when performing the acrobatic version ofthe diving board
I am about to describe two actions which should be per-formed in rapid succession Let me explain the two move-ments first and then I will discuss their precise timing
photo 4
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
16
First push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top ofthe deck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between thethumb and the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of theright side of the double (see photo 5)
Remember the left thumb should sit somewhere along themiddle of the long left side border ndash the closer to the centerthe better (see photo 6)
The second step is to release of the long right side of thedouble with your second third and fourth fingers so it snaps
photo 5
photo 6
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
17
up simulating a diving boardrsquos movement when in use Donrsquotlet go of the pressure being exerted by the left thumb continueto pin the two cards to the top of the deck
Now letrsquos talk about the timing necessary to get to the pointwhere two cards face down sitting as one side jogged half itswidth to the right (see photo 7)
If you release the right side of the card from the fingers beforepinning down the left side the double will flip off the deckcausing it to become aerial We will discuss this further in theacrobatic version of the diving board double This isnrsquot whatyou want when performing the non-acrobatic one
On the other hand if you release the right side of the cardfrom the fingers after pinning down the left the double will behorrifically bowed with little chance of it regaining normalshape
Remember to execute these two motions in rapid successionThe instant one side is pinned the fingers let go of the otherside It looks as if the top card is now jogged on the side of thedeck
Use your right hand to turn the double face up (see photo 8)Square it with the deck Donrsquot worry you donrsquot need to hold abreak in order to turn the double face down - thanks to thebow
photo 7
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
18
Turning the Diving Board face down
You could just turn the double face down like any otherdouble lift but then you have a bow left in your double Thisis perfect if you need to get a break again If not you have a bowleft in your double
Whatrsquos great about the DBD is if you execute it again the bowwill automatically be removed from both cards - returningboth cards to original condition
Itrsquos simple Perform the DBD to turn the cards face up thenperform the DBD to turn them back face down
It should be easy to turn the double back face down becauseof the bow placed in it To do so you will use the same actionsyou used to turn the double face up Irsquoll describe it again
Move your thumb from the long left side and bend it so the tiptouches the top two cards somewhere in the middle along theleft side border
photo 8
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
19
When you squeeze the long right side of the double with yoursecond third and fourth fingers to get into the hinge positionan instant separation appears automatically near your thumbThis makes it simple to obtain your break (see photo 9)
Repeat the actions of getting the double into a half Charlier-shift position by moving the first finger underneath the deckExecute the Charlier-shift action by raising the deck to the leftthumb This action is what placed the bow in the card and itrsquosthis same action that will take the bow out of the cards (seephoto 10)
photo 9
photo 10
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
20
Push the pad of the thumb straight down to the top of thedeck pinning the two cards (as one) firmly between the thumband the deck Your other fingers prepare to let go of the rightside of the double (see photo 11)
Let go of the long right side from the second third and fourthfingers so the double snaps up again simulating a springingdiving board
You should now have two cards face up squared as one sidejogged for half its width to the right (see photo 12) Use yourright hand to turn the double face down
photo 11
photo 12
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
21
Once you have a foundation in the basic technique of thediving board double you can move on to the acrobatic ver-sion
Click here to view the performance of the basic technique
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
22
Advanced TechniqueThe Acrobatic Diving
Board DoubleThe Deep End
Even though there is one slight difference between bothmethods a considerable amount of practice is required for theacrobatic version Execution isnrsquot the toughest part controllingthe catch is
Itrsquos like swimming in the deep end for the first time Everyonetells you itrsquos the same motion but it wonrsquot feel the same Itrsquosscarier than being in the safety of shallow water Having thecard leave the safety of the deck and rotate multiple times inthe air is much scarier than pinning it solidly to a secure side-jogged position on top of the deck
As in the non-acrobatic version hold the deck in dealingposition Your left thumb rests along the long left side of thedeck (photo 13)
photo 13
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
23
photo 14
Repeat the steps described for the non-acrobatic diving boarddouble to the point where you have the two cards in a halfCharlier-shift position Move your first finger underneath thepack and then begin the Charlier-shift motion as before
The deck will move closer to the thumb and at the same timethe double will begin to bow The long right side of the doublegets pulled back underneath the deck by the second third andfourth fingers (photo 14)
Here is where you will find the difference between the ver-sions of the DBD
Instead of pinning the double to the top of the deck with thetip of the thumb allow the thumb to float a half of an inch orless above the deck Hold your thumb in position and makesure it does NOT pin the card to the deck When you releasethe double with your fingers the two cards will flip out fromunderneath the thumb and rotate as one up into the air (photo15) Remember the left thumb should sit close to the middleof the long left side border - the closer to the center the betterPrecision matters
Your finger positions are crucial If you are having a launchand rotation problem I would start by checking your fingerpositions
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
24
Catching the acrobatic double
Your goal is to catch the double on the top of the deck withouthaving it split and letting everyone know it was two cards Ilike to catch the cards after four rotations we will talk aboutthis more in the TIPS section on page 27
Trying to snatch the double mid-flight is absolutely the worstway to achieve your goal of catching it square Rather thanplucking it you must let the double land softly on top of thedeck
Itrsquos a question of physics when catching the double
I use the same physics principle to catch the double as anAmerican football receiver does when catching a pass Weboth use inertia to slow the object down before grasping itThe only difference between our motion is the receiver moveslaterally with the ball while I move up and down with thedeck Ultimately this slows the fall and allows the cards toland softly on the top of the deck
photo 15
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
25
photo 16
This is the same inertia used when catching a baseball in aglove rolling with a punch to lessen or deflect the force of astrike and even the same principle used to catch a raw egg inyour hand during a game of egg toss
Method for catching
Once in the air adjust the pack so itrsquos directly underneath therotating double After the double reaches its apex and gravitytakes over the cards will dive toward the floor While holdingthe deck move your hand downward too matching thedirection the double is headed (see photo 16)
This downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches - thatrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provide enoughcushion
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
26
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double rotateland on to the top of the deck Itwill softly land flat on top and should not split
As soon as the double touches the top of the deck use yourleft fingers like a cage to ensure catching it (see photo 17) Thiscage-like grip squares the cards immediately This is a built-insafety feature of your hand used to correct a possible cardseparation on a land
Click here to view the performance video of the advancedtechnique
photo 17
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
27
Tips for Improving YourDiving Board Double
Technique
Face up vs Face down
Once you get comfortable launching and catching the doublethe next step will be to control which side it lands on Eventu-ally you want to start in a face down position launch andhave it land face up Then you want to re-launch it from a face-up position have it revolve in the air and then land facedown
This will take dedicated practice there are no special secrets
If you can perform the acrobatic DBD consistently you willnotice it only flips a certain amount of times before gravitytakes over and pulls it back down Normally I get my doubleto revolve in the air about four times before landing
Letrsquos explore the idea of letting the double revolve one extratime before catching it Wersquoll assume you are hitting fourrotations most of the time By allowing the card to rotate overone more time it lands opposite of what position it started inIn your case letting it flip five times instead of four will makeit land face up
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
28
Start with the cards face down and then execute an acrobaticDBD
Drop your hand several inches giving the double room for anextra revolution
Getting this extra revolution is a knack but as with any otherskill you will gain confidence with practice
TIPSTip 1
Let the tension provided by the thickness of the cards work toyour benefit
Irsquom the laziest guy in the room and also a big fan of letting thecards do the work for me If I have to exert anything more thana simple finger action in magic I feel overworked Manypeople have a tendency to use their wrist to supplement thepower needed to get the double in the air Or even worse theyjust throw it in the air Let the flexing of the cards do all thework for you If you execute the technique properly you wonrsquotneed any supplements
If you find yourself throwing the cards into the air you cancorrect this with twenty minutes of practice All you have todo is plant the back of your hand against a table Try andexecute the acrobatic diving board without breaking contactwith the table
Tip 2
Whether performing the acrobatic or the non-acrobatic versionof the diving board I prefer to use it with the majority of the
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
29
deck I favor using at least half of the deck but a full one iseven better
I never use these handlings for small packet work Because ofthe use of the Charlier-type action which exerts specific pres-sure to achieve the bow you need a thicker block of cards Youcould do it with a small packet of cards but why Isnrsquot itbetter to choose the best technique for the job
Keep the DBD reserved only for when you have the bulk ofthe deck in your hand
Tip 3
The DBD can be performed with two three four or five cards- any more than five cards and you arenrsquot really deceivinganyone The goal of the DBD is to make multiple cards looklike one Focus on the singular look and you will fool theworld
Tip 4
The type and age of cards used play a major role in theamount of height you achieve
If the deck has been beer stained and re-dried your chances ofhitting a perfect acrobatic DBD are slim
The paper a card is printed on is called its stock Playing cardscome in all different types of stocks Therefore some brands ofplaying cards are thicker than others For instance Europeancompanies like Carta Mundi or Piatnick use a much thickerstock to print their cards on than American brands like Bicycleor Gemaco
Usually I use American manufactured cards so I consider fourrotations in the air a normal height for my acrobatic DBD
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
30
Again the thicker the cards you use the higher you can springthem With a deck of Carta Mundi Desert Inn cards I couldeasily receive eight to ten rotations - the stock is twice as thickas normal
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
31
Bonus AmbitiousSequence Using theDiving Board Double
The sequence about to be describe is something I have neverpublished before Most of my magician friends have neverseen it either because I only perform this for laymen Theunique aspect of the Diving Board is its one-handed natureThe Fugazzi Sequence will show you
The Fugazzi Sequence
Hold the deck in dealing position Execute a non-acrobaticDBD and then turn it face up Square the cards with the deckand have someone sign their name on the face-up card with amarker The deck should still be held in dealing grip (seephoto 18)
photo 18
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
32
Place the right hand over the pack and grasp it in Biddle grip(see photo 19)
Swing-cut the upper half of the pack into the left hand usingyour right first finger The remaining half should still be heldBiddle style in the right hand (see photo 20)
Execute a non-acrobatic DBD in the left hand so the face-upsigned card sits half its width to the right
Use the packet in the right hand to flip the double face downby going beneath making contact between the two and thenusing an upward motion to flip it completely over face down -back onto the left-hand packet (see photo 21)
photo 19
photo 20
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
33
Push off the top card of the left-hand packet with the leftthumb Insert its lower right corner into the upper left cornerof the packet in the right hand (see photo 22) The card shouldbe out-jogged and just held in the right packet by a smalledge
The spectator thinks this is his signed selection In reality itrsquosnot The signed selection actually sits on top of the left-handpacket
With your left fourth finger pull down approximately half ofthe packet in your left hand causing a break to open randomly
photo 21
photo 22
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
34
where in the middle Insert the out-jogged card and the wholeright-hand packet all the way into the break completelysquaring the deck (see photos 23a and 23b)
The work is finished all thatrsquos left is for you to call attention tothe magical occurrence Snap your fingers gesture with thehand - whatever you use to represent a magic catalyst duringyour ambitious routine
Now show the top card is the signed selection (see photo 24)
photo 23a
photo 23b
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
35
photo 24
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
36
The Exercise(Snap with a DBD)
St Louis magician TG Murphy created a card move calledThe Snap that is very reminiscent of a popular skateboardingmove called the Kick Flip Basically in a kick flip you use akick to revolve the skateboard 360 degrees and then land backon it - all the while moving several miles per hour MrMurphy used this principle in a great flourish called THEMIDAIR TRIPLE CUT Within this cut he more specificallyuses a move called the Snap to flip a packet of cards 360degrees into the other hand Wouldnrsquot it be fun to fantasizethat modern skateboarding techniques come straight from themagicianrsquos repertoire Snap as mucho style
For this exercise the deck only revolves 180 degrees instead of360 degrees Also the deck stays in the same hand it doesnrsquotflip from one hand to the other
I only use this as an exercise its applications are truly limitedin the real world
Breif Description of the Snap
Hold the deck in left-hand dealing grip but your first finger isbent underneath Your second third and fourth fingers pulldown the long right side of the deck Your thumb which holdsthe left side of the deck also applies a similar downward
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
37
pressure As your first finger applies an opposite pressure tothe deck by pushing from underneath the deck raises to aslightly convex position (see photo 25)
The pressures here are much lighter than whatrsquos used to createthe bow in a DBD
If you allow the first finger to push up and out from under-neath the deck and then release the long right side of the deckbefore the left side of the deck - the whole deck will flip upand rotate 180 degrees (see photos 26 a-e)
photo 25
photo 26a
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
38
photo 26b
photo 26c
photo 26d
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
39
Finally it will land back in your hand in dealing grip Actuallyit almost looks as if it doesnrsquot leave the handrsquos vicinity at allItrsquos a tight rotation
Super Practice Tip for the Snap
Better use of your time can be allocatedpracticing more repetitions of the Snap ratherthan picking up cards around you constantlySimply place the deck back into the box it camewith and then practice the Snap Because thedeck is now cased cards wonrsquot fly all over theplace
It also teaches you within a few minutes theproper pressure to apply in order to get the cardsto flip up and over
Remember the right side is the side that flips upfirst
photo 26e
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
40
Combination
Combine the Snap with the acrobatic diving board double
With the deck face up in your left hand execute an acrobaticdiving board double
While the double is in the air execute the TG Murphy Snapflipping the whole deck from face up to face down as thedouble lands
The deck is now facing down and the double has landed ontop of the deck
TG Murphyrsquos book Imagication lsquoMidAir Triple Cutrsquo 1988 (pg254) Morespecifically -rsquoThe Snaprsquo Mr Murphy originally published the Snap in amanuscript written in the mid-70rsquos
The classic skateboarding move is credited to skateboard legend RodneyMullen who invented it in the mid-1980rsquos
Click here to view the performance of The Exercise
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
41
Behind the BackSomething I demonstrate at most of my lectures is flipping thediving board from behind my back over my shoulder andback onto the deck This might be one of the most impossiblelooking stunts I perform the whole evening In reality itrsquos noharder than executing and catching an acrobatic DBD
This application is definitely for the juggler mind-set
I will explain this in three phases At the end itrsquos up to you tocombine all the phases with practice so you can perform anacrobatic DBD behind your backhellipand catch it on the deck infront of your body
Click here to view the performance of Behind the Back
Phase 1 Tossing from behind the back
You need to learn to throw an object from behind your back soit comes up over your right shoulder It should clear theshoulder with some room and then descend in front of youGrab a tennis ball and practice with it first
Itrsquos often hard for beginners to throw an object from directlybehind and have it land in front of you within arms reach Itfeels awkward to stretch your hand back behind you Withsome stretching and some practice the tense feeling will goaway
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
42
Make sure when you throw the tennis ball from behind usemore of a forward motion than a sideways motion ndash not too farforward or it will not land comfortably within your grasp Ifyou have to chase the ball forward itrsquos not as stylish
Once you get the feeling of tossing from behind the back witha tennis ball itrsquos time to grab your deck and try it with anacrobatic DBD
Phase 2 Launching from an awkwardposition
Up to this point you have been practicing the DBD with thedeck held in front of your body Most likely you have beenlaunching and catching the acrobatic diving board at yournavelrsquos level This is the area where I find it most comfortableto launch and land
But now you need to do some practicing in other positions
Place your hand behind your back somewhere around thebase of the spine Practice launching an acrobatic DBD fromthat position Donrsquot worry about catching it yet that will comenext
Learn the force at which you have to release the diving boardso it will clear your right shoulder and drop in front of youJust worry about the force needed to get it up there donrsquotworry about catching it yet
Once you can get the cards to clear the shoulder try andpractice getting them to land directly in front of you
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
43
Phase 3 Combining all the elements
Itrsquos time to place all the elements together Once you get thedouble clearing your right shoulder and dropping directly infront of you apply inertia to catch it Phase three is all aboutcombining the elements into one smooth sequence
From start to finish the behind the back DBD should not takemore than two or three seconds to perform
Start with the deck in front of you Obtain the thumb break asthe deck moves behind your back You should have the deckin the half Charlier-shift position by the time your handreaches the small of the back Without pausing launch theDBD from behind your back allowing several rotations Asfast as you can remove your left hand from behind andimmediately place it beneath the falling double Move yourhand downward matching the direction the double is headedThis downward motion of the hand should be no more thantwo to three inches ndash again itrsquos all thatrsquos needed to provideenough cushion
As the double makes contact with the deck the hand comes toa stop Let the double land softly on top of the deck
I would like to make one last comment onperforming the acrobatic DBD behind the back -your footwork I mentioned earlier it doesnrsquotlook stylish if you have to run to catch thediving board Actually I strive never to moveOn rare occasions I might take a single step insome direction to catch it but again I try not toItrsquos most impressive when the only thingmoving is the double
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
44
Deck VanishIf you thought launching an acrobatic DBD from behind washard I have one more application which is not for the faint ofheart
Once yoursquove perfected launching and catching from behindyou can add one step and actually turn this feat into a genuinemagic effect
In preparation for this effect remove all contents from yourback left pocket You need to prop this pocket open - prefer-ably with something you are already carrying A cell phoneChapstick another boxed deck of cards a credit card or a longcar key are some of the items you carry and can use to propopen your back left trouser pocket (see photo 27) The idea isto create a big opening within the pocket so you can easilydump the deck of cards into it
photo 27
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
45
Cull the four aces to the top of the deck before you begin Keepa break with your fourth finger underneath the aces
Perform the acrobatic DBD behind the back with the four acesand at the moment you release the quad-lift dump the deckinto the left pocket (see photo 28) Leave the deck there andthen move your left hand out from behind fast enough to catchthe aces dropping in front of you
You only need to get the corner of the deck into your pocketenough so that if you take a few steps away it wonrsquot drop onthe floor
photo 28
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
46
Catch the aces by allowing them to fall into your cuppedhands This is a wonderful pose (see photo 29)
Catching the aces cupped frames the effect so you are showingboth hands at the same time and the deck is gone ndash all with-out verbally saying it
Itrsquos also a good applause cue because your hands are out-stretched in front of you mdash right as the effect finishes
The four aces are now ready for anything you need them forwithout a deck Personally I like to perform the Asher Twistright after I vanish the deck Itrsquos a great solve for what to dowith the deck when you only need four cards to perform theAsher Twist
On the flip side the Asher Twist is a great solve for what to dowith four aces when you suddenly donrsquot have the deck any-more
I donrsquot like to call attention to the deck vanishing Instead Iprefer to be subtle about it Itrsquos more my style to let themnotice the deck has vanished By letting them realize it firstyou strengthen the impact of the effect
photo 29
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
47
Where Do I Go FromHere
Now that you understand the basic concepts of the DBD plusall of the applications I urge you to go and practice them tonear perfection The faster you start working on these tech-niques the sooner you will master them
If you have any questions about the DBD please email them toLeeLeeAshercom
I also love to hear about good applications you might havedeveloped with the DBD Since its inception Irsquove seen peoplekick the acrobatic DBD back into the air with their foot I havealso seen people perform color changes with the acrobaticDBD Again I urge you to go and practice Good luck
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
48
About the AuthorLee Asher was born into the art of magic His father Markencouraged Lee to embrace magic at the age of seven This iswhat helped to shape Lee into the magician he is today
In 1991 and 1992 Lee was the International Brotherhood ofMagicians Junior Close-up Champion making him the young-est competitor ever to win two years in a row
After graduating High School Lee moved to Las VegasNevada for University While there Lee spent time with someof the greatest magicians in America While studying Leefound time to perform and keep his skills sharp He was oneof the two original Walk-Around Magicians at Caesarrsquos Magi-cal Empire at Caesarrsquos Palace
Once college was finished Lee chased his heart to ParisFrance While there he studied and shared his magic withsome of Europersquos finest magical minds
Now Lee Asher resides in Eugene Oregon where he continuesto advance the art of magic Lately he has been working on anew concept called Pulp Friction
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
49
Contact InformationIf you have any questions or comments about the Diving BoardDouble please contact me
Lee Asher1541 Bailey Hill RdApt 6-DBDEugene Or 97402USA
Leeleeashercom
wwwLeeAshercom
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
50
References
All items below use the Diving Board Double
Slap Happy ndash Five Card Stud DVD
Silver Surfer - Five Card Stud DVD
Face-down Silver Surfer ndash Close Cover before StrikingBooklet
Riding the Ripple ndash Le Asher Booklet
First reference to Diving Board - Le Asher Booklet
Asheresque ndash Thinking Out Loud Booklet
Revolutionary Change ndash Well Done Video
httpwwwleeashercomdivdoubvidhtm
httpwwwleeashercomacrdoubvidhtm
51
51
